operation manual

ManualsBrandsPhilips ManualsLED TVs55PUS8909C/12

www.philips.com/welcome

55PUS8909C

ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

Summary of content (126 pages)

PAGE 1
Register your product and get support at www.philips.
PAGE 2
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ - 1‬ﺟﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪- 6.3‬‬ ‫‪- 6.4‬‬ ‫‪- 6.5‬‬ ‫‪- 6.6‬‬ ‫‪- 6.7‬‬ ‫‪- 6.8‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ - 1.1‬ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪Android‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ - 1.2‬ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪HD Ultra‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ - 1.3‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ - 1.4‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺗﺘﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ - 1.5‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ - 1.6‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣؤﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪ - 1.7‬ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪Skype - 1.8‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪ - 1.9‬ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫‪ - 1.10‬ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ - 2‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪- 2.1‬‬ ‫‪- 2.
PAGE 3
‫‪- 15.2‬‬ ‫‪- 15.3‬‬ ‫‪- 15.4‬‬ ‫‪- 15.5‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺗَﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪51‬‬ ‫‪51‬‬ ‫‪51‬‬ ‫‪ - 16‬ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪- 16.1‬‬ ‫‪- 16.2‬‬ ‫‪- 16.3‬‬ ‫‪- 16.4‬‬ ‫‪- 16.5‬‬ ‫‪- 25.2‬‬ ‫‪- 25.3‬‬ ‫‪- 25.4‬‬ ‫‪- 25.5‬‬ ‫‪51‬‬ ‫‪52‬‬ ‫‪ - 26‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪52‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪52‬‬ ‫ﺃﺫﺭﻉ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺴﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪52‬‬ ‫‪52‬‬ ‫‪52‬‬ ‫‪ - 17‬ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫‪- 17.1‬‬ ‫‪- 17.2‬‬ ‫‪- 17.3‬‬ ‫‪- 17.4‬‬ ‫‪- 17.
PAGE 4
‫‪1.3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜّﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻢّ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻌﺾﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪Android‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﺘﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ YouTube‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Twitter‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﻘﺲ )ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ(‪ .
PAGE 5
‫ﻋﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣؤﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1.7‬‬ ‫‪1.10‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻫﻮ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻤﻤﺎﺭﺳﺔﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﻔﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻌﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺮﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ‪ TV Remote App‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Philips‬ﻫﻮ ﺻﺪﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ‪ TV Remote App‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻮﻟﻚ‪ .
PAGE 6
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪2.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻛﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2.2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺿﻌﺖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪.www.philips.com‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻪ‪.
PAGE 7
‫‪2.4‬‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪2.6‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪POWER‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﻣﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺇﻃﻼﻗﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻓﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻠﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺸﺎﺑﻬﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .
PAGE 8
‫‪ MDU‬ﺃﻭ ‪Unicable‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،Unicable‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪SAT‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻼً ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻳًﺎ ﻣﻼﺋﻤًﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻗﻤﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺎﻥ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻻﺣﻘًﺎ ‪.
PAGE 9
‫ ‪4‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪.WPS‬‬‫‪WPS‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋُﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ ‪ 5‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬‫ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 6‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪7 -‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺠﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻹﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪3.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪ PIN‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻊ ‪WPS‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ ‪ WPS‬ﻣﻊ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ ، PIN‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓً ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﺤﺜًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ‪، WEP‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻌﺬّﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.
PAGE 10
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪(WoWLAN) Fi-Wi‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ‪.)WoWLAN (Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪… WoWLAN‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ‪.)WoWLAN (Wi-Fi‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫‪ BACK‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 11
‫ ‪3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 4‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕﺗﻢ‪.‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫‪ BACK‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰّﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ "ﻣﺴﺢ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ"‪ .
PAGE 12
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫‪4.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﻤﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪EasyLink HDMI CEC‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺗﻚ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ ، EasyLink‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪EasyLink HDMI CEC‬ﻗﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.
PAGE 13
‫‪ HDMI‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪DVI‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻣﺎ ﺯﻟﺖ ﺗﻤﻠﻚ ﺟﻬﺎﺯًﺍ ﻣﺰﻭﺩًﺍ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ DVI‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪ DVI‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﻤﻮﺻﻞ ‪)AUDIO IN‬ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪ 3,5‬ﻣﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ -‬ﺑﺼﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ -‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪ .5.
PAGE 14
‫ ‪3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪BACK‬‬ ‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ‪EasyLink‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻚ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪EasyLink‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ، EasyLink‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ‪EasyLink‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪EasyLink‬‬ ‫‪4.3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ EasyLink‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .
PAGE 15
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁ‬ ‫ﺑﻀﻊ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻭﺗﻢ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ‪) ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻔﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ‪PIN‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﻴّﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺻﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 16
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻥ ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤؤﻗﺖ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4.5‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺻّﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﺿﻒ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪HDMI‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ SCART‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺘﻢ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ…‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻪ ‪ 180‬ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪ .
PAGE 18
‫‪4.8‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪DVD‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪DVD‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ ، SCART‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺘﻢ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪-‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ‪Scart /‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﺮﻛّﺐ‬ ‫( ‪ (CVBS‬ﻭﻛﺒﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻣﺰﻭّﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﺨﺮﺝ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ) ‪) CVBS‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮّﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) SCART‬ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪.
PAGE 19
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻜّﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺚ ﻣؤﻗﺘﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﺗؤﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ‪USB‬‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ‪USB‬ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 2‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪USB‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ‪) ‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ(‪ .‬ﺳﺘؤﺩﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.
PAGE 20
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ‬ ‫• ﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ = ‪OK‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ =ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ ، USB‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ‪USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻙ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺮﻳﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻧﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻻﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.
PAGE 21
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻥ ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ Ultra HD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ Ultra HD‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪USB‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺼﻐّﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ " ‪ " Ultra HD‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ Ultra HD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻭﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‪‬‬ ‫‪ SOURCES‬ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪.
PAGE 22
‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4.16‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫‪ BACK‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺗﺬﻛّﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪4.17‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻤّﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺃﺱ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ‪ ‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ 3.5‬ﻣﻢ‪ .
PAGE 23
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪5.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪POWER‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5.3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺟﻮﻳﺴﺘﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴُﻀﻴء ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺿﻌﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺮﻏﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻞ ﻗﺎﺩﺭًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪...
PAGE 24
‫‪5.5‬‬ ‫ﻣؤﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ‪ 4‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻠﻖّ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 10‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.
PAGE 25
‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪6.1‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪HOME‬‬ ‫‪ - 1‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SOURCES‬‬ ‫‪‬‬‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪     - 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻳؤﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪ ، ‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ‪ /‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪- 1‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺗﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪INFO‬‬ ‫‪ - 4‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 2‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 26
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻣؤﺷﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﺸﻂ‪)  .‬ﺭﺃﺱ ﺳﻬﻢ( ﻣﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﺇﺑﻬﺎﻣﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ – OK‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ – ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻵﻥ ﺣﺮﻙ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺼﻢ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﺫﺭﺍﻋﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ OK‬ﻭﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻫﻮ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 5‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥٍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺑﻬﺎﻣﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪.
PAGE 27
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ ‪6‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪7‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫‪ BACK‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻬﻢ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪] ،WATCH‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻗُﻞ "ﺷﺎﻫﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺪﻣﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ"[ ‪-‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻴﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﻭﻳﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.
PAGE 28
‫ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪Spacebar‬‬ ‫‪ - 6‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻭ ‪OK‬‬ ‫‪  - 7‬ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﻳﺘﻀﻤّﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ Azerty /Qwerty‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ ،Cyrillic /Qwerty‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻧﺼﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻲ ﻭﺍﺑﺪﺃ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪OK‬ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Cyrillic‬ﻭ ‪Qwerty‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪.
PAGE 29
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ‪Azerty‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪…Azerty‬‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪ -‬ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻧﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ -‬ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺳﺒﻖ ﻭﺗﻢ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻧﻪ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪)Philips‬ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻰ ‪ 10‬ﺳﻨﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮﺍﺕ(‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺣﻴﻦ ‪ ‬ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.
PAGE 30
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6.8‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻐﻠﻒ ﺑﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺪﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺭﻃﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺑﺪًﺍ ﻣﻮﺍﺩًﺍ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.
PAGE 31
‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪7.1‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ ‪9‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ‬‫ ‪ 10‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 11‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ،12 -‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﺑﻔﻮﺍﺋﺪ ‪ ،Android‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،Android‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .
PAGE 32
‫ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺟﺮﻳﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ﺛﻮﺍﻥٍ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻭﺟﺪﺗﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 33
‫• ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺇﻋﻼﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﻼﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫‪.BACK‬‬ ‫‪8.1‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﻳﺤﺬﺭﻙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ‪.
PAGE 34
‫‪EXIT‬ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪9.4‬‬ ‫™‪Chrome‬‬ ‫‪9.1‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ‪ ‬ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ‪Chrome‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗُﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺪّﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﺘﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .
PAGE 35
‫ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻃﻔﺎﻝ…‬ ‫‪9.7‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪HOME ‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪‬‬‫‪ OPTIONS‬ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻤﻨﺢ ﻗﺒﻮﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 4‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬‫ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻌﻤﺮ ‪ 18‬ﺳﻨﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫‪ BACK‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪. Google‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪… Android‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪Android‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ ‪3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫‪ BACK‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪9.10‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻘﻴﺖ ﺩﻋﻮﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.
PAGE 37
‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳؤﺩﻱ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺜﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪10.1‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﺠﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﻟﺘﺄﺟﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ‪ .
PAGE 38
‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪TV on Demand‬‬ ‫‪11.1‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺗﺘﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻼءﻣﺔً ﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻮﺟﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .
PAGE 39
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﺸﻔﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪12.1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮًﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳؤﺩﻱ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻛﺒﻞ ) ‪ (DVB-C‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﺩﺓً ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪ 1001‬ﺻﻌﻮﺩًﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ . ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺷﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 40
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ ﻟﺒﻀﻊ ﺛﻮﺍﻥٍ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻋﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﺳﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪LIST‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ ‪*.‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ‬‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻥ ‪ ‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮًﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪) ‬ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ( ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁ )‬ ‫‪ ،(CAM‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻮﺭًﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺟﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.
PAGE 42
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ ‪ /‬ﻧﺺ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻤﻸ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔً‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﻠء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻠﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﺼ‪/‬ﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،TEXT‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪TEXT‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻠء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ…‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) ‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕﻣﻠء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 43
‫‪ 4 -‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪‬‬ ‫‪BACK‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺑﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻧﺼًﺎ ﺭﻗﻤﻴًﺎ ﻣﺨﺼﺼًﺎ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﻭﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.SUBTITLE‬‬ ‫ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪.BACK ‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻛﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.
PAGE 44
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ…‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺃﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫‪ BACK‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻼﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ( ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻻﺣﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ( ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .
PAGE 46
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻻً ﺑﻜﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪HDMI CEC‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫‪13.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻭﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ…‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪‬‬‫‪SOURCES‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﻴُﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬‫ﻳُﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪‬‬‫‪ ، BACK‬ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 47
‫ﺿﻮﺀ ‪LED‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻘﻀﺎﺀ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫‪14.1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻌِﺪ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺍﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪14.
PAGE 48
‫ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻤﻚ‪ .‬ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻧﻘﺪﻳة‪/‬ﺯﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻉ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒّﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻭﻕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺧﻄﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳؤﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻻﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻊ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻻﺩ‪.
PAGE 49
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ…‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺸﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪2 -‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪14.3‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫‪14.4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺘّﻊ ﺑﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﻨﺼﺤﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺪﻯ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﻼﻡ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺷﻌﻮﺭﻫﻢ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺍﻧﺰﻋﺎﺝ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭٍ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻧﺤﺒّﺬ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺃﻱ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻣﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪ .(.‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﺪﺩًﺍ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺯﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻬﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪.
PAGE 51
‫‪15.4‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪15.1‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ…‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪‬‬‫‪.MULTI VIEW‬‬ ‫‪ 2 -‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ ‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻣﻬﺎﻡﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣؤﺧﺮًﺍ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ، Chrome‬ﺇﻟﺦ ‪ -‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .
PAGE 52
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪16.1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻤﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 53
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻻﻋﺒﻴﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﻘﺴﻤﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻻﻋﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻻﻋﺒَﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻭﺟﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ‪ Philips PTA507 -‬ﺃﻭ ‪ PTA508‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ PTA509‬ﺃﻭ ‪ PTA517‬ﺃﻭ ‪ PTA518‬ﺃﻭ ‪.PTA519‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪.
PAGE 54
‫‪17.3‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪Miracast Fi-Wi‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪™. Wi-Fi Miracast‬‬ ‫‪17.1‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪Wi-Fi Certified‬‬ ‫‪ . ™Miracast‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Miracast‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ‪™،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ‪ .
PAGE 55
‫* ﺇﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ Miracast‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪WiDi 3.5‬ﻭﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪17.4‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺠﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪)Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ " ‪") tvname _DIRECT‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻻ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪Miracast‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 56
‫• ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ + ‬ﺃﻭ ‪.- ‬‬ ‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫‪ LIST‬ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ )ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪ ,(.‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫‪.INFO‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓً ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ…‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪًﺍ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻏﺎﻥٍ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.
PAGE 57
‫ ‪2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪Pause TV‬‬ ‫‪18.1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺚ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻪ ﻻﺣﻘًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ…‬ ‫• ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪USB‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻬﻴﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 58
‫ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪‬‬ ‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪. OK‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ ‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪19.1‬‬ ‫ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺚ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻭﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻪ ﻻﺣﻘًﺎ‪.
PAGE 59
‫‪19.3‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ…‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪HOME ‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪) ‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ( ﺃﻭ‪) ‬ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ( ﺃﻭ‪) ‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻣؤﻗﺖ( ﺃﻭ‪) ‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺘﻪ‪.
PAGE 60
‫‪20‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Skype‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪Skype‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﻢ ‪Skype‬ﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪ Skype‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﺠﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺳﻢ ‪Skype‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪20.1‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪Skype‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Skype‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪www.skype.com‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺍﺣﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻚ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ‪ ™Skype‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 61
‫ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕﺣﻔﻆﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4 -‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻗﻢﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‪ ‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻣﻨﻌﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻚ ﻣﻦ ‪Skype‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪5‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬‫ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪6‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 7‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕﺣﻔﻆ ‪ .
PAGE 62
‫ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﻭﻋﻠﻤﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 3‬ﻋُﺪ ﺇﻟﻰﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 5‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 6‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ ‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻃﺎﺭﺋﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪Skype‬‬ ‫‪20.5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪Skype‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻌ ّﺪ ‪Skype‬ﺑﺪﻳﻼً ﻋﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﻃﺎﺭﺋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ…‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬‫ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ .
PAGE 63
‫ ‪ 1‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻘﺘﺮﺡ‬‫ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ‪ Skype‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪2‬ﻗﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪3 -‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺭﺻﻴﺪ ‪Skype‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺭﺻﻴﺪ ‪…Skype‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Skype‬ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ ‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺭﺻﻴﺪ ‪.Skype‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 64
‫<ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻲ‬ ‫ ‪3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫< ﺃﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﺪﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ‪Skype‬ﻹﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ‪…Skype‬‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﺳﺠّﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪Skype‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻚ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ، Skype‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ ‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪ 3 -‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .
PAGE 65
‫‪21‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Room Multi‬‬ ‫ﺩﻓﻖ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪21.1‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ، Multi room‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻌﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﺰﻭﺩًﺍ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﺃﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ*‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .
PAGE 66
‫‪22‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ…‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ‪ ‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺭﻣﺰﻩ ﻣﻦ ‪ . Smart TV‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Facebook‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Twitter‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.Smart TV‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻼً ﺑﺈﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.
PAGE 67
‫‪23‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪TV Remote App‬‬ ‫‪Philips‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ‪ TV Remote App‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Philips‬ﻫﻮ ﺻﺪﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻮﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ‪TV Remote App‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ .‬ﺃﺭﺳِﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﺃﻳًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺚ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻪ ﻭﺷﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ‪TV Remote App‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻮﻟﻚ‪ .
PAGE 68
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫‪ BACK‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪24.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻋﻴﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﻧﻪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻭﻳﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.
PAGE 69
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫< ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ ‪2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫‪ BACK‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫< ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫<ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫< ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ ‪2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪WP .‬ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻭ ‪BL‬ﻫﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 70
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪BACK‬‬ ‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ…‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫< ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫< ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫< ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ ‪2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺃﻭﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺃﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫‪ BACK‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 71
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.Natural Motion‬‬ ‫ ‪3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫‪ BACK‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ‪.
PAGE 72
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔﺍﻟﺠﻬﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ…‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ…‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫< ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫ ‪2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫‪ BACK‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 73
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫‪ BACK‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪﻫﻤﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ…‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﻋﻦﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪.
PAGE 74
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻫﻲ…‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ‪Natural‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫• ﺯﺍﻫﻲ‬ ‫• ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ ، HDMI CEC‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.EasyLink‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ‪ ،EasyLink‬ﻓﺴﻴُﺮﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ .
PAGE 75
‫ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻻﺣﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.hue +Ambilight‬‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ‪Hue Bridge‬ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3 -‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪. OK‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺭﺑﻂ ‪ Philips Hue bridge‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫‪.Hue‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ‪Hue‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺑﺼﻴﻼﺕ ‪ Philips Hue‬ﻛﺒﺼﻴﻼﺕ ‪ ،hue +Ambilight‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ…‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺼﻴﻼﺕ ‪ Philips Hue‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 76
‫< ‪.Lounge Light‬‬ ‫ ‪2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪Ambilight‬‬‫< ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ ‪3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫‪ BACK‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﻲﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪hue +Ambilight‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺼﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ‪ TV Remote App‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Philips‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ‪Lounge Light‬‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪ .
PAGE 77
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﻞ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ؟‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺗﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ ،PIN‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﻟـﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫< ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ ‪ 3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻟﻪ‪.8888‬‬‫ ‪ 4‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪًﺍ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬‫ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪﻩ‪.
PAGE 78
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ ‬ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣؤﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺸﻄًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﻨﻄﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴّﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪24.7‬‬ ‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.
PAGE 79
‫< ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪OK‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫‪ BACK‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺚ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺗﺼﻒ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﻜّﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤؤﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻜّﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻓﻲﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫< ﺍﻟﻜﻼﻡ‬ ‫‪24.
PAGE 80
‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪّﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺎﺋﻌﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻤﺮﺳﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‪ ‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺣﺪﻳﺜًﺎ‪.
PAGE 81
‫ﺳﻴﻌﻠﻤﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻣﺸﻐّﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒّﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺪﺩﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﻫﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.
PAGE 82
‫‪ -2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫< ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻴ‪/‬ﺎﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Unicable‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪Unicable‬ﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻴﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺿﻌﻴﻔًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩﺑﺤﺚ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.
PAGE 83
‫ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ‬ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻴﺲ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﻤﻜّﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﺠﻤﻊ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺑﺚ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﻔﺮ( ﻭﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻳﻼﺋﻢ ﺑﻠﺪًﺍ ﻣﻌﻴﻨًﺎ‪ .
PAGE 84
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻤﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ…‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪LNB‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫< ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ‬ ‫ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻤﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕﺑﺤﺚ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺜﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻤﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺮ‬‫ﻓﻮﻕ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5 -‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.
PAGE 85
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗؤﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﻮﺝ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﻄﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪.
PAGE 86
‫ﻓﻴﺸﺘﻐﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻳﺸﺘﻐﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ…‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫< ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫ ‪2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪25.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪25.2‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻦ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .
PAGE 87
this software for any purposewith or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyrightnotice and this permission notice appear in all copies.THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS.
PAGE 88
Voisine. This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the MIT license, which can be found below. publicity relating to this software or products derived fromit. This software may be referred to only as "the Independent JPEG Group'ssoftware".We specifically permit and encourage the use of this software as the basis ofcommercial products, provided that all warranty or liability claims areassumed by the product vendor. Protobuf (2.
PAGE 89
used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOTLIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
PAGE 90
gain unless it is incidental;(ii) reproduction and distribution of the Software and Document in complete and unmodified form; and(iii) when you distribute the Software and Document, you agree to attach the Terms of Use and a statement that the latest version of the Terms of Use is available from the "Office of the Government Chief Information Officer" Web site (http://w ww.ogcio.gov.hk/en/business/tech_promotion/ccli/terms/t erms.htm). bound by the most updated version of the Terms of Use.3.
PAGE 91
Audio Codec SRC (1.8.1) This TV uses Audio Codec SRC which is used by libamphal.so.The original download site for this software is : https://ccrma.stanford.edu/~jos/resample/This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the LGPL v2, which can be found below.
PAGE 92
D-Bus is a simple system for interprocess communication and coordination.The original download site for this software is : http://dbus.freedesktop.orgThis piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of GPL V2. fusion (8.10.3) Fusion provides an implementation of abstractions needed for multi-threaded/multi-process programming: .The original download site for this software is : http://www.directfb.
PAGE 93
IPRoute2 (NA) IPRoute2 is used for TCP/IP,Networking and Traffic control.The original download site for this software is : htt p://www.linuxfoundation.org/collaborate/workgroups/netw orking/iproute2This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of GPL V2. substantial portions of the Software.
PAGE 94
Technology.Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. Hewlett-Packard Company makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
PAGE 95
daemonThe original download site for this software is : http://hostap.epitest.fi/wpa_supplicant/This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of GPL version 2.
PAGE 96
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.
PAGE 97
indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
PAGE 98
are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights.
PAGE 99
are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does. 1.
PAGE 100
and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.) Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6.
PAGE 101
contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all.
PAGE 102
AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
PAGE 103
separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof. TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION 1. Definitions.
PAGE 104
notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the License. where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted.
PAGE 105
Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner] 8. Limitation of Liability.
PAGE 106
or consequential damages, which may result from the use of the PNG Reference Library, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. our efforts or the library will fulfill any of your particular purposes or needs. This library is provided with all faults, and the entire risk of satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy, and effort is with the user.
PAGE 107
0. Definitions -------------- ============ Throughout this license, the terms `package', `FreeType Project', and `FreeType archive' refer to the set of files originally distributed by the authors (David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg) as the `FreeType Project', be they named as alpha, beta or final release.
PAGE 108
the terms of this license. forms) and derivative works thereof for any purpose; and to authorize others to exercise some or all of the rights granted herein, subject to the following conditions: 4. Contacts ----------There are two mailing lists related to FreeType: o Redistribution of source code must retain this license file (`FTL.TXT') unaltered; any additions, deletions or changes to the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying documentation.
PAGE 109
* ========================================== ========================== * * This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young * (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim * Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). * */ in * the documentation and/or other materials provided with the * distribution. * * 3.
PAGE 110
.‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ‬2 .‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻗﺮﺍءﺗﻪ‬3  ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬4 ‫ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬،‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬،‫ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‬BACK .‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ in the * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software * must display the following acknowledgement: * "This product includes cryptographic software written by * Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.
PAGE 111
‫‪26‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪26.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻭﻟﺒﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ ‪EC /2002/96‬ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﺪﻑﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲﺇﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﺑﻔﺌﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺧﻀﺮﺍﺀ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .
PAGE 112
‫‪26.
PAGE 113
‫ﻳﻔﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪ .ESD‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬّﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺇﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺪﺧّﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪26.9‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫• ‪USB 2.0‬‬ ‫• ‪Ethernet LAN RJ-45‬‬ ‫• ‪)n /g /Wi-Fi 802.
PAGE 114
‫‪27‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪Philips‬‬ ‫‪27.1‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ،Philips‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ,‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 115
‫‪ BACK‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ ‪5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻮﺩﺗﻪ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪27.3‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ -‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪.
PAGE 116
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳؤﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻪ ﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻺﺻﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‪.
PAGE 117
‫‪28‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻧﻘﻼﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﺑﺪًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻐﻄﻰ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﻄﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﺑﺪﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺃﺛﺎﺙ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﺰﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺐ( ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻷﺛﺎﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺧﺒﺮ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺛﺎﺙ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪28.
PAGE 118
‫‪28.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺑﺪًﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﻜﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻀﺮﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻴء‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻠﻄﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻃﺒﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻼً‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨّﺐ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺃﺿﻮﺍﺀ ‪Ambilight LED‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺑﺪًﺍ ﻣﻮﺍﺩًﺍ ﻛﺎﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻭﺑﻬﺖ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺀ ﺑﺄﺳﺮﻉ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .
PAGE 119
‫ﻋﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﺠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪Philips‬ﺍﺗﺨﺎﺫ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﻼﻣﺘﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻟﻼﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ) ‪ ( EMF‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻠﺘﺰﻡ ‪ Philips‬ﺑﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻭﺗﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ‬ ‫ﺗؤﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺳﻠﺒًﺎ‪ .
PAGE 120
‫™ ‪DTS Premium Sound‬‬ ‫‪Windows Media‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ Windows Media‬ﺇﻣّﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪Microsoft‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘّﺤﺪﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪DTS Premium Sound‬‬ ‫™‬ ‫‪Microsoft PlayReady‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺑﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ‪ ، DTS‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ‪. patents.dts.com ://http‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺑﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ‪DTS Licensing Limited‬‬ ‫‪ ,DTS .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪ DTS‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪ DTS 2.0‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪DTS © . Inc ,DTS‬‬ ‫‪ .Inc ،‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.
PAGE 121
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺎﻟﻜﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﻴﻦ‪.
PAGE 122
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪74 Ambilight+hue‬‬ ‫‪76 Ambilight، Lounge Light‬‬ ‫‪76 Ambilight، Lounge Light+hue‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ‪74 Ambilight،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﻟﻮﻥ ‪76 Ambilight،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ‪6 Ambilight،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪76 Ambilight،‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪74 Ambilight،‬‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪112 Android OS،‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪14 CAM،‬‬ ‫™‪34 Chrome‬‬ ‫‪14 CI+‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ‪10 DMR،‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ( ‪81 DVB‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪12 DVI،‬‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫‪13 EasyLink‬‬ ‫‪12 EasyLink HDMI CEC‬‬ ‫ﺗ
PAGE 123
‫‪ 54‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ‪54‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺢ ‪35‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪42‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ ‪111‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ‪52‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ ‪71‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ ‪71‬‬ ‫ﻣؤﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪24‬‬ ‫ﻣؤﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ‪23‬‬ ‫ﻣؤﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪26‬‬ ‫ﻣؤﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﻮﻝ ‪26‬‬ ‫ﻣؤﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪26‬‬ ‫‪ 20‬ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻭﺱ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪20‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺎﺟﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪37‬‬ ‫‪ 19‬ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ ،USB‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬ ‫‪ 19‬ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ ،USB‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫‪ 20‬ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ‪ ،USB‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ
PAGE 124
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ‪42‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪42‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ‪54‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ‪69‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ‪70‬‬ ‫ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪33‬‬ ‫ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪33‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ‪83‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻲ ‪52‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﺀ ‪42‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ‪78‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ‪115‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ‪31‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ‪110‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ‪68‬‬ ‫‪ 115‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪Philips‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻮﺍﺀ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪42‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪31‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ‪86‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ‪86‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ‪33‬‬ ‫‪ 14‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ
PAGE 125
‫ﺝ‬ ‫‪ 28‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪Azerty ،‬‬ ‫‪ 28‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪Qwerty ،‬‬ ‫‪ 27‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ Qwerty ،‬ﻭ‪Azerty‬‬ ‫‪ 28‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ Qwerty ،‬ﻭ‪Cyrillic‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪28‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣؤﺷﺮ ‪26‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪25‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ‪28‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ‪29‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪27‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠّﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ‪28‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪16‬‬ ‫ﺟ
PAGE 126
Powered by TCPDF (www.tcpdf.org) Contact information Argentina 0800 444 7749 Buenos Aires 0810 444 7782 België / Belgique 070 700 035 (0,15€/min.) Bosna i Hercegovina 033 941 251 (Lokalni poziv) Brazil 0800 701 0245 Sao Paulo 2938 0245 Бълария 02 4916 273 (Национален номер) Česká republika 228880895 (Místní tarif) Danmark 3525 8314 Deutchland 0180 501 04 69 (0,14€/Min.) Ελλάδα 2111983028 (Εθνική κλήση) España 902 88 10 83 (0,10€ + 0,08€/min.